DCS-Mirror/richmahn_en_tn
2
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://git.door43.org/richmahn/en_tn synced 2025-03-06 16:58:51 +00:00
Files Issues Releases Wiki Activity See in Reader
c2be5f02c5
richmahn_en_tn/tn_ACT.tsv

1.4 MiB
Raw Blame History

1ReferenceIDTagsSupportReferenceQuoteOccurrenceNote
2front:intromw280# Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Acts\n\n1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)\n2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)\n3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)\n4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)\n5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)\n6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)\n\nLuke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.\n\n### What is the book of Acts about?\n\nThe book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”\n\n### Who wrote the book of Acts?\n\nThe author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.\n\nLuke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the church?\n\nThe church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\nThe “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Figurative usages in the book of Acts\n\n“arise/arising”\n\nLuke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\n\n“brothers”\n\nLuke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts\n\n“to the same”\n\nThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.\n\n“in/to/into the temple”\n\nLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?\n\nThe following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.\n\nFirst, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:\n- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”\n- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”\n- Acts 24:6–8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”\n- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”\n\nSecond, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:\n- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”\n- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”\n- Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”\n- Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”\n- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).\n- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”\n- Acts 15:17–18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
31:introvyg90# Acts 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The Ascension\n\nThis chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])\n\n### Baptism\n\nLuke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])\n\n### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”\n\nSome scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Long sentence\n\nAs was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\n### The details of the death of Judas\n\nThere are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.\n\nIt is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.\n\nBut it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you could let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.\n\n### The 12 disciples\n\nThere is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.\n\nAll three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.\n\nOnce again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
41:1q9eprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην1Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
51:1a000ὦ Θεόφιλε1Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
61:1ryj5rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΘεόφιλε1**Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
71:1a001rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfoπερὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν1Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
81:1a002rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπερὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν1This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
91:2a003rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας1While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
101:2n435rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀνελήμφθη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
111:2a424rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀνελήμφθη1Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
121:3a004οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις1As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
131:3dup3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitμετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν1This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
141:3a005rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις1The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
151:3yc16rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitδι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων1While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
161:3a006rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ1See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
171:4a007rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
181:4vb7grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι1The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
191:4sg4hrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς1Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
201:4a009rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτοῦ Πατρὸς1**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
211:4tj6rrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotationsἣν ἠκούσατέ μου1In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
221:4d3krrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youἠκούσατέ1Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
231:5fnq5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἸωάννης1Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
241:5a075rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ1After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
251:5dzj1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε1You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
261:5a010rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotesοὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας1Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
271:6n9wtrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν1In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
281:6a011rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomεἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ1This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
291:6f7ujrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsεἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
301:7a012rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι1Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
311:7y1furc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletχρόνους ἢ καιροὺς1The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
321:7a013rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesὁ Πατὴρ1**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
331:7a014rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
341:8ld4krc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultλήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες1Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
351:8a015rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsδύναμιν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **power**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
361:8vb4mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς1This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
371:9e1q1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitβλεπόντων αὐτῶν1Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
381:9l1cqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπήρθη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
391:9ug58rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν1Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
401:10enu1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν1Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
411:10a017rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorκαὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο1Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
421:10a018rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequentialκαὶ1Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
431:10a019rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἄνδρες δύο1These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
441:10a020ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς1In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
451:11a021rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἳ & εἶπαν1This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
461:11a022rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbsοἳ & εἶπαν1If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
471:11gpg3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
481:11a024rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?1The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
491:11a025rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες1The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
501:11a026rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν1In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
511:11a027rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
521:11cue7ὃν τρόπον1Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
531:12x2nkrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsὑπέστρεψαν1The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
541:12a028rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
551:12a029rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος1**Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
561:12a030rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomΣαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν1The expression **having a journey** refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
571:12p19grc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownΣαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν1The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
581:13vis2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὅτε εἰσῆλθον1The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
591:13zt12rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownεἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες1In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
601:13a032rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἸάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου1These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
611:13a033rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἸάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου1These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
621:13a034rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΣίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς1**Simon** is the name of a man, and **Zealot** is another name by which he was known. (1) **Zealot** could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) **Zealot** could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
631:14z6cfὁμοθυμαδὸν1The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
641:14a035rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitγυναιξὶν1Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in [Luke 8:2–3](../luk/08/02.md) and [23:49](../luk/23/49.md). Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
651:14a037rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinshipτοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ1These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
661:15il8wrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventκαὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
671:15cup2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις1Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
681:15a038rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἀναστὰς1Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
691:15liz1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν ἀδελφῶν1Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
701:15a039rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτῶν ἀδελφῶν1Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
711:15tl5mrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι1Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
721:15a040rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὄχλος ὀνομάτων1Luke is using the term **names** to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
731:15a041ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ1See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
741:16a042rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
751:16a043rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
761:16a045rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
771:16i8tlrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
781:16a046προεῖπε1Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
791:16f3umrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ1Peter is using the word **mouth** to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
801:16a048rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheτοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν1Peter is using the act of guiding **the ones arresting Jesus** to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
811:17q73yrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultὅτι1Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
821:17a049rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismκατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης1These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
831:17a050κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν1Peter is using the term **numbered** in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
841:17a051rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
851:17tmv2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἐν ἡμῖν1Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word **us** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **us** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
861:17a052rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksτὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης1Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
871:18tmv1rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundμὲν οὖν1Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
881:18dd58rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjοὗτος1Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
891:18a053rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
901:18w83jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας1Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
911:18kg3qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπρηνὴς γενόμενος1Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
921:18a054πρηνὴς γενόμενος1The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
931:18a055rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
941:19a056γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ1The verb form is not passive here, since **known** is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make **it** the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
951:19a057rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleγνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ1Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
961:19a058rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
971:19mxf3rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterateἉκελδαμάχ1**Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
981:20mz13rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksγέγραπται γὰρ1Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
991:20d7pkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesγέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος1If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
1001:20ip5wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveγέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν1If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1011:20g30drc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3pγενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ1If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1021:20crk3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeγενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ1This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1031:20hiulrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personγενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ1It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1041:20mc45rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismγενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ1These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1051:20chq4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorγενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ1The word **habitation** likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1061:20a059τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος1The word **overseership** refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in [1 Timothy 3:1](../1ti/03/01.md). Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
1071:20uctmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3pτὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος1If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1081:20jdsgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeτὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος1This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
1091:20elz8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personτὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος1It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1101:21t916rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge0To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1111:21xz69rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς1In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1121:21zuf7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomεἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς1Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1131:22qb8jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1141:22a061rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτῆς ἡμέρας ἧς1While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1151:22a062rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ1The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1161:22yi3arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1171:22a063rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν1When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1181:22mrx7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἕνα τούτων1Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1191:22g3n9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1201:23lz7yrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἔστησαν δύο1The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1211:23a064rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἔστησαν δύο1Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1221:23a065rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἔστησαν δύο1When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1231:23a066rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἸωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος1**Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1241:23s1ffrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1251:23a067rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΜαθθίαν1**Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1261:24a068rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge0Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1271:24a069rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysπροσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν1Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1281:24zd1frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheπροσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν1The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1291:24a070σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων1Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
1301:24se6mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorσὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων1Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1311:24a071rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformalσὺ Κύριε1The word **you** is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
1321:24a072rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα1The person who is praying is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1331:25mg47rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysλαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς1The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **apostleship** identifies what kind of **ministry** this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1341:25ryv6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας1The expression **turned aside** means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1351:25tx6nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemismπορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον1This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1361:26a073rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1371:26r84crc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς1The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1381:26a074rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς1The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1391:26w4phrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν1The word **fell** means “selected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1401:26fk4xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσυνκατεψηφίσθη1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1412:introx8fr0# Acts 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Pentecost\n\nThe events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.\n\n### Tongues\n\nLuke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.”\n\n### Last days\n\nIn 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])\n\n### The prophecy of Joel\n\nIn 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Baptize\n\nIn this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1–11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])\n\n### Wonders and signs\n\nThese words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “You killed” (2:23)\n\nThe Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.\n\n### Long sentences\n\nThere is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\nThere is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\n### Poetry\n\nThe quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
1422:1i4sarc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventκαὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς1Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1432:1a076rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς1This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1442:1a425rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς1Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1452:1i4sbrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ1Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1462:1a077ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό1See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
1472:2qjc3ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ1The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself.
1482:2a078rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simileὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας1Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1492:2jec5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorφερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας1Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1502:2a079rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον1Luke speaks of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1512:2t4y4ὅλον τὸν οἶκον1Luke may be using the word translated **house** in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
1522:2a080rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomοὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι1Luke may be using the term **sitting** to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1532:3re3tγλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός1This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in [Isaiah 5:24](../isa/05/24.md), for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
1542:3xtk4διαμεριζόμεναι1This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
1552:3a081rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν1The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1562:3a082rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν1Luke is using the word **sat** to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1572:4v7hirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1582:4a251rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1592:4a083rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfoἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις1Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
1602:4nr9frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις1The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1612:4a084καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς1Here, **giving** has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
1622:4a085καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς1The word translated **to speak out** means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
1632:5dz1lrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-backgroundδὲ1Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
1642:5yft2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς1Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1652:5stq9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπαντὸς ἔθνους1The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1662:5a086rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν1The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1672:6bpj7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσυνεχύθη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1682:6u9hcrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν1The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1692:7m8kdrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον1The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1702:7a087rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον1The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1712:7a088rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἰδοὺ1**Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1722:7wnk2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionοὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι1The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1732:8hzm8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionκαὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?1The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1742:8a090rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1752:8a091rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος1Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1762:8a092rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν1The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1772:8wb5trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν1The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1782:8a093rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1792:9f1verc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΠάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται1These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1802:9dm23rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν1These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1812:10tmb4rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΦρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης1These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1822:11w8jyἸουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι1The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
1832:11jnp7rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΚρῆτες & Ἄραβες1These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1842:11a097rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ1The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1852:12el2frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο1The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1862:12a098rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες1These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1872:12a099rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι1The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1882:13a100rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveγλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1892:13fg59rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitγλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν1The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1902:13jj1nrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownγλεύκους1This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1912:14k5hrrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionσταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ1Peter **stood** to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles **stood** with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1922:14c919rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοῖς ἕνδεκα1Luke is using the adjective **eleven** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1932:14d9tbrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς1The idiom **raised up his voice** means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1942:14a102rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1952:14a103rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι1Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1962:14a104rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες1This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1972:14ei5jτοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω1This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
1982:14hal2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3pτοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω1If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
1992:14brjcrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω1The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent (**you**), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2002:14a105rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Peter uses the word translated **and** to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2012:14qp16rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου1Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2022:15a106rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2032:15a107rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὗτοι1The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2042:15a108rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ2Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2052:15a109ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας1In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
2062:15h28qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας1Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2072:15a110rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinalὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας1If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
2082:16f9hzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2092:16ktw9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ1The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2102:17a111rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα1The material in [2:17–21](../02/17.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase **God says** to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2112:17a112rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα1You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2122:17ijl8καὶ ἔσται1Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
2132:17a113ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις1See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
2142:17u2d1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου1God says that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2152:17a114rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα1God refers to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2162:17a115rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται1If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2172:17a116rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveὑμῶν-1If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2182:17a117rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsοἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι1God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2192:18uwd7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotationsκαί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2202:18nd34ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου1If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
2212:18a118rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις1Here, **days** means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2222:18wz2irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου1See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2232:19a119rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ δώσω1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2242:19a120δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα1Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
2252:19a121ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω1Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
2262:19p5zirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionἀτμίδα καπνοῦ1Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2272:20ylv7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2282:20a6yhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2292:20a122rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος1God is speaking as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2302:20a123rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2312:20a124rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisκαὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα1Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2322:20a125rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκαὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα1If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2332:20f34krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorκαὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα1God is speaking as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2342:20swb2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ1The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2352:20lc4grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου1This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2362:20a126rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου1In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2372:21a127rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2382:21a128καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς1Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
2392:21vql5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2402:21a129rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται1The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2412:21a130rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personτὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου1God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2422:21a131rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου1Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2432:21a132rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου1The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2442:21a133rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksσωθήσεται1This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2452:22sa78rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2462:22g6vjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους1Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2472:22f2t1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2482:22a135rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletδυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις1The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2492:23a136rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοῦτον1Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2502:23i6unrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον1The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2512:23s38brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2522:23a137rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ1The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2532:23f5knrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἀνείλατε1It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2542:23e38arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων1Here, **hand** refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2552:23a138rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἀνόμων1Peter is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2562:23f6kdrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀνόμων1By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2572:23a197προσπήξαντες1This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
2582:24a140ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν1It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
2592:24ei37rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν1The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2602:24s8j3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorλύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου1Peter speaks of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2612:24a141rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionτὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου1Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2622:24a142rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ1If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2632:24ykq4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2642:24vuf4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationκρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ1Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2652:25dd5arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesΔαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ1In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2662:25a143rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsΔαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ1The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2672:25a144rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2682:25a145rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitΔαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν1Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2692:25n2lsrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐνώπιόν μου1The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2702:25tqakrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisδιὰ παντός1The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2712:25a146rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐκ δεξιῶν μού1Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2722:25l6xprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐκ δεξιῶν μού1In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2732:25a147rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorμὴ σαλευθῶ1Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2742:25s4yprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveμὴ σαλευθῶ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2752:26a148rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesδιὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2762:26z8vwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου1Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2772:26a149rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου1Here, the **tongue** represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2782:26zz6krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyκαὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι1Here, **flesh** means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2792:26a150rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsκαὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2802:26a151rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationκαὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι1The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2812:26a152rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι1If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2822:27m3ijrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2832:27a153rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismοὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν1These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2842:27whi3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformalοὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου1The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
2852:27a154rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheοὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην1The Messiah says **my soul** to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2862:27a156rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν Ὅσιόν σου1The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2872:27rld3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personτὸν Ὅσιόν σου1The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2882:27a157rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἰδεῖν διαφθοράν1Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2892:27l5cdrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἰδεῖν διαφθοράν1The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2902:28a158rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου1You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
2912:28a159rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformalἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου1The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
2922:28xhi3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς1The Messiah speaks of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2932:28ej5mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης1The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2942:28y7gfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorμετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου1Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2952:28a161rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksμετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου1This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2962:29pv1xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2972:29ps7crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2982:29wh97rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ1A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2992:29vtc6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐτάφη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3002:29a162rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης1Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3012:30a163rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3022:30a164rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπροφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς1Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3032:30x11qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ1Peter is using the word **loins** to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3042:30hq71rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ1When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3052:31a165rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ1The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3062:31a166rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3072:31tn4brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3082:31a167rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦ Χριστοῦ1**Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3092:31a169rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomοὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν1Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3102:31a170rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyοὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν1Peter is using the word **flesh** to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3112:31up5xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν1The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3122:32udn1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός1As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3132:32kw6arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς1By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3142:33a171rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3152:33kij2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3162:33c9mrrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ1Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3172:33a172rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ1In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3182:33a173rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionτήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου1Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3192:33a174rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciplesτοῦ Πατρὸς1**Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
3202:33c1drrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐξέχεεν1The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3212:33wsg9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐξέχεεν1Peter says that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3222:34m7fyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesλέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου1The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3232:34i8wurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitεἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου1**The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3242:34a175rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐκ δεξιῶν μου1Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3252:34kvn8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐκ δεξιῶν μου1In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3262:35nf1xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου1The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3272:35a176rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksτῶν ποδῶν σου1This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
3282:36a177rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultοὖν1Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3292:36msqtrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3pγινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ1If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
3302:36tgbfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personγινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ1It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3312:36pnp5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ1Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3322:37s85qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3332:37xan1rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν1Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3342:37w1maκατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν1Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
3352:37l15xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorκατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν1Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3362:37zls6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3372:37a178rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί1See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3382:37a179rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveτί ποιήσωμεν1The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3392:38a180rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youμετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε1The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3402:38cmb7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveβαπτισθήτω1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3412:38geb2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3422:38a181rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsεἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3432:39a182rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία1Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3442:39a183rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν1Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3452:39a184rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν1Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3462:39v8virc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν1Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3472:39a185rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveΚύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν1By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3482:39a186rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἂν προσκαλέσηται1Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3492:40a187rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν1Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3502:40v6iprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysδιεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς1Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3512:40a188rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσώθητε1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3522:40wtd5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης1The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3532:40a189rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης1The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3542:41k1kjrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstoryοὖν1Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
3552:41r9qzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ1Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3562:41a190rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ1Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3572:41kz64rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3582:41sv5jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheψυχαὶ1Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3592:41a47frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπροσετέθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3602:42a191rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3612:42gc59rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheτῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου1Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3622:42a192rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου1By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3632:43a193rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος1Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3642:43gi9vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος1Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3652:43a194rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος1Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3662:43ys3yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο1Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3672:43q6dmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletπολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα1The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3682:44u8qkἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ1See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
3692:44jy2wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleεἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά1Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3702:45h8tnrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletτὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον1The words **properties** and **possessions** mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3712:45f74src://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκαὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ1Here the pronoun **they** refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun **them** refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3722:45n9hiπᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν1Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
3732:46in43καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν1The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
3742:46a427rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ ἱερῷ1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3752:46q1gerc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheκλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον1See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3762:46i2ykrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας1Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3772:46a195rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3782:47z6igrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleαἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν1Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3792:47kc42rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτοὺς σῳζομένους1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3802:47a196ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό1See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
3813:introhpd90# Acts 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The covenant God made with Abraham\n\nThis chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Servant”\n\nTwice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in Chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.\n\n### “You killed” (3:15)\n\nFor the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
3823:1b5rmrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-backgroundδὲ1Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
3833:1br7irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ἱερὸν1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3843:1a198τὴν ἐνάτην1In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
3853:1a199rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinalτὴν ἐνάτην1If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
3863:2f227rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκαί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3873:2u6nurc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundκαί τις ἀνὴρ1In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3883:2j68trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ1Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3893:2a200rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτὴν λεγομένην1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3903:2a201rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesὩραίαν1**Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3913:2a202rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ἱερόν1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3923:3a203rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν1The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3933:4xq4uἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν1This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
3943:4e3c6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveβλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς1Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3953:6x6bmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον1Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3963:6zi9trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι1What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3973:6t2vfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου1Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3983:6a205rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeπεριπάτει1This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
3993:7ec6jrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsπιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά1In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4003:7a206rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4013:8a207rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4023:8abc1rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς1The pronoun **he** refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4033:8q13irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfoἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς1Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
4043:8zp7xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ἱερὸν1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4053:9a208rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπᾶς ὁ λαὸς1The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4063:10zy7hἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος1Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
4073:10p2zhrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ1This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4083:10a209rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4093:10j6zfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ1The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4103:10a210rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ1Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4113:10a211rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4123:11a212rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπᾶς ὁ λαὸς1The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4133:11rk1mrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος1This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4143:11rj43rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτῇ καλουμένῃ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4153:12ndi3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4163:12uyg1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ1Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4173:12j6ldrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?1Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4183:12g4y1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ1By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4193:12mwd9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ1Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4203:13q8q2rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἈβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ1These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4213:13a213rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν1Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4223:13kmqwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν1The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4233:13a214τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν1See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
4243:13a215παρεδώκατε1Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
4253:13cp1jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου1Here the phrase **before the face of** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4263:13yy96rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjκρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν1Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds **one** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4273:14a217rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
4283:14a218rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον1Peter is using both the adjective **Holy** and the adjective **Righteous** to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds **One** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4293:14a219rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletτὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον1The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4303:14a220rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον1This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4313:14s6qjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4323:15a221rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἀπεκτείνατε1It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4333:15ljn8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς1Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4343:15a222rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐκ νεκρῶν1Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4353:15jwb1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς1Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4363:15a223rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἡμεῖς1If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4373:16abc2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ1Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4383:16qt8wrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsτοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ1The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4393:16a224rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ1Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4403:16abc3rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ1The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4413:16a225rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην1Peter is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4423:17v45tκαὶ νῦν1Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
4433:17a226rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀδελφοί1Peter addresses the people as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4443:17x62krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε1Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4453:17a228rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν1Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4463:18gcc1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως1Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
4473:18ms6dδιὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν1Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, **the prophets**, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **mouth**. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
4483:18z3l7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν1Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4493:18a229rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάντων τῶν προφητῶν1Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4503:19cw18rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπιστρέψατε1Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4513:19zm6yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4523:19a230rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας1Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4533:20a231rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου1Peter is speaking of these **times** as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4543:20x3carc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsκαιροὶ ἀναψύξεως1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4553:20f2wmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου1Peter is using the term **face** to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4563:20h3nkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀποστείλῃ1Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4573:20yzr6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4583:21vgn8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι1Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4593:21x2f3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4603:21a2m8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀπ’ αἰῶνος1The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4613:21a12irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν1Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4623:22a232rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesΜωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4633:22a249rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariantsΚύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν1Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
4643:22a250rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveΚύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν1Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
4653:22v5nfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὑμῖν ἀναστήσει1Here the expression **raise up** does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in [2:24](../02/24.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md). In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4663:22t8dirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν1Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4673:22a234rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarativeαὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα1Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
4683:22a235rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomαὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα1Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4693:23a236rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4703:23t8a5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4713:23a237rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarativeπᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ1Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
4723:23a238rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheπᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις1Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4733:23a239rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου1Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4743:24u6x3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάντες & οἱ προφῆται1Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4753:24xp9hἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς1Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
4763:24m9prrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας1Peter is using the word **days** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4773:24a241rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας1Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4783:25rh2nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν1Peter is using the word **sons** in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4793:25a242rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsοἱ υἱοὶ1Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4803:25a243rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyκαὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν1The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4813:25a244rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesπρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
4823:25a245rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν1Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4833:25wid4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν1Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4843:25mad5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου1The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4853:25a246rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου1As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4863:25a247rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4873:25g31mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyπᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς1Here, **families** refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4883:26b7tzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν1The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4893:26z5q6τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ1See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
4903:26x8ssrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν1Here, **turning** someone **from** something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4913:26a248rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4924:intropv3a0# Acts 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Unity\n\nThe first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.\n\n### “Signs and wonders”\n\nThis phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)\n\nThe cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “no other name” (4:12)\n\n“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
4934:1abc4rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsλαλούντων & αὐτῶν1The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4944:1ew3lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ1The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4954:1m74src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι1The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4964:1d3tvrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheοἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι1Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4974:2abc5rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsδιαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς1The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4984:2mg5lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsκαταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4994:2np5grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν1Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5004:3a254rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5014:3a255rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας1The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5024:3zla7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας1The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5034:3a256rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5044:3h5f9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη1The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5054:4a257rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstoryδὲ1Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
5064:4a258rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5074:4bm1frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν1Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5084:4qd8grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε1The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5094:5lw2drc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventἐγένετο δὲ1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
5104:5cdj1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitσυναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς1Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5114:5j6p8rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsαὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς1The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5124:5i9tjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσυναχθῆναι1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5134:6a259rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἍννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας1Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5144:6l44nrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἍννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος1These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5154:6a260ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ1Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
5164:7abc6rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsστήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο1The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5174:7t1eqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?1The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5184:7jc21rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι1Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5194:7a261rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualὑμεῖς1Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
5204:8su5xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveΠέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5214:8a262rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorΠέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν1Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5224:8a263rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι1Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5234:8a264rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦ λαοῦ1Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5244:9pq85rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ironyεἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται1Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
5254:9je6drc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5264:9b92nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοὗτος σέσωσται1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5274:10q9ssrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3pγνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ1If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
5284:10snd5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveγνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ1The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5294:10j3pxrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsπᾶσιν ὑμῖν1The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5304:10khn7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ ὀνόματι1Here, **name** refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5314:10a265rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἸησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου1See how you translated this in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5324:10a266rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε1It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
5334:10jyj6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν1As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5344:10a267rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐκ νεκρῶν1Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5354:11nwg6rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὗτός1The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5364:11w195rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας1Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5374:11c1bhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5384:11f1nxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκεφαλὴν γωνίας1The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5394:12a268rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesοὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία1In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5404:12tq3zrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsοὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5414:12l66wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5424:12iz7krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyοὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς1Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5434:12jm25rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν1This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5444:12a269rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἐν ἀνθρώποις1Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5454:12gg8hrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5464:12tdw8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμᾶς1Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5474:13r6d6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomθεωροῦντες1Luke is using the word **seeing** to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5484:13t6kcrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου1Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5494:13qaa5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαταλαβόμενοι1The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5504:13xn39rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν1Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5514:13erv7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται1The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5524:14h3cyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5534:14a270rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsσὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον1The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5544:14fq4wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν1The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5554:15ql31rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους1The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5564:15a272rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοῦ Συνεδρίου1Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5574:16p4g6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?1This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5584:16jn12rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ1This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5594:16nh5sγνωστὸν σημεῖον1Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
5604:17a273rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5614:17f71lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ1By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5624:17a274ἐπὶ πλεῖον1Alternate translation: “any further”
5634:17w52jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyλαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ1Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5644:17a275rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesμηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων1In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5654:17a276rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsμηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων1Here, **men** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5664:18a277rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5674:18a278rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκαλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν1The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5684:18a279rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletμὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν1The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5694:18a280rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5704:19a281rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον1Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
5714:19a282rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον1This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5724:19jf1drc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5734:19a283rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5744:20a284rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5754:20hf3urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν1Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5764:20a285rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesοὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν1You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
5774:21y5y1rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς1The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5784:21z2bxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitδιὰ τὸν λαόν1The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5794:21jbl6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν1Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
5804:22gy8drc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως1In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
5814:22a286rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5824:22ju4wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως1Luke is speaking as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5834:22a287rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionτὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως1Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
5844:23a288rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀπολυθέντες1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5854:23a289rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-goἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους1In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
5864:23j2cxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοὺς ἰδίους1The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5874:23a290rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismοἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι1As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5884:24j3aprc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν1The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
5894:24a291ἦραν φωνὴν1Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
5904:24zu28rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἦραν φωνὴν1The expression **they raised their voice** is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5914:24a292ὁμοθυμαδὸν1The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
5924:24a293rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformalσὺ1The word **you** is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in [4:25–30](../04/25.md). You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
5934:24a160rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς1The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5944:24a294τὸν οὐρανὸν1The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
5954:25ka83rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών1The word **mouth** refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5964:25vc5zrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesτοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?1As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
5974:25a295rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμῶν1The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
5984:25kat6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοῦ πατρὸς1Here, **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5994:25a296παιδός1The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md).
6004:25a297rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά1Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
6014:25a298rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά1These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
6024:25f1x6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?1In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6034:25w622rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκενά1The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6044:26fb5arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesπαρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ1This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
6054:26w2byrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismπαρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ1In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
6064:26w64brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπαρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς1The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6074:26a299rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6084:26a300ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ1See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
6094:26yv19rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ1Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6104:27b1g9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσυνήχθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6114:27nuc1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ1The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6124:27ca33παῖδά1Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah”
6134:27a303rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὃν ἔχρισας1In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6144:28yz7mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι1Here, **hand** means God’s power and **counsel** means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6154:28a304rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι1The words **hand** and **counsel**, joined by **and**, are expressing a single idea. The word **hand**, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his **counsel**, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6164:28a305rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι1The believers are speaking of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
6174:29b38zκαὶ τὰ νῦν1The believers use the expression **And now** to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
6184:29t5qmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν1The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6194:29a306rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123personτοῖς δούλοις σου1The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6204:29zh7jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον σου1The believers are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6214:29a307rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsμετὰ παρρησίας πάσης1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6224:30x9r1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι1Here the **hand** represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6234:30a308rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletσημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα1The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
6244:30t5uwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος1Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6254:30txb5τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ1Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
6264:31a309rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstoryκαὶ1This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
6274:31a310rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6284:31x9b3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐσαλεύθη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6294:31ps3mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6304:31a311rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος1Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6314:31a312rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6324:31a313rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsμετὰ παρρησίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6334:32a314rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-backgroundδὲ1Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
6344:32xu3jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία1Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6354:32a315rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία1The terms **heart** and **soul** mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
6364:32a316τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ1Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
6374:32zyp5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά1The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
6384:33a317rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6394:33a318rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsχάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς1The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6404:33d8drrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsχάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6414:34a331rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridgeοὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς1This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
6424:34a319rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6434:34a320rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ2Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6444:34gw3vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον1The phrase **as many as** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
6454:34l938rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6464:35a321rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων1The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
6474:35vv4zrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων1In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6484:35a322rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveδιεδίδετο1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6494:35ps4src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6504:36uc2arc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsἸωσὴφ δὲ1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6514:36a323rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἸωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς1**Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6524:36a324rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6534:36a325rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως1If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6544:36a326rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως1Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6554:36nr4vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomυἱὸς παρακλήσεως1The expression **Son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6564:36a327rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsυἱὸς παρακλήσεως1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6574:37a330ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ1See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned”
6584:37gtv5rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων1See how you translated the similar expression in [4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6595:introk2uh0# Acts 5 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)\n\nNo one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1–10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.\n\n## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Long sentences\n\nActs 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.\n\nThere is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
6605:1v27arc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsἀνὴρ δέ τις1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6615:1ysl9rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἉνανίας1**Ananias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6625:1a332rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsσὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ1Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6635:1a333rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΣαπφείρῃ1**Sapphira** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6645:2a334rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς1The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6655:2xm1tσυνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν1It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
6665:2dy8brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπαρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν1This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6675:3grr9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionδιὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?1Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6685:3pqd4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorδιὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου1Peter is speaking of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6695:3a335rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτὴν καρδίαν σου1Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6705:3a426rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου1Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
6715:3zz5urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον1Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6725:3a336rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς1The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6735:4vu7grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionοὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?1Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6745:4vi8wἔμενεν1Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
6755:4k7ncrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπραθὲν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6765:4a337rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν1The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6775:4a338rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν1The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6785:4i5dwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?1Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6795:4a339rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?1Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6805:4a340rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?1Peter speaks of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6815:4a341rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyοὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ1Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6825:4a342rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἀνθρώποις1Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
6835:5a343rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους1Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6845:5cc5yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemismπεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν1The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
6855:5a344rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsπεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν1Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
6865:5a345rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας1Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
6875:6a346rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν1Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6885:6a347rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ νεώτεροι1This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6895:6a348rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownσυνέστειλαν αὐτὸν1It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6905:7a349rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ1This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6915:7ry54rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ1The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6925:7k3c9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸ γεγονὸς1If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6935:8a350ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν1The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
6945:8a351rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualἀπέδοσθε1Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
6955:8bcf6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου1This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6965:9v7swrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?1Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6975:9hc22rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveσυνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6985:9w1lbrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youὑμῖν & σου & σε1The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
6995:9pg1eπειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου1Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
7005:9a352rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyπειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου1Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7015:9a353rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες1Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7025:9xj1lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyοἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ1Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7035:9a354rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ1Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7045:9a355rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε1The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7055:10s7enrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemismἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν1The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
7065:10a356rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν1Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
7075:10nwb9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ1This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7085:10a357rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ νεανίσκοι1See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7095:11vym8rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstoryκαὶ1This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
7105:11a358rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα1Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7115:12c2e7rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-backgroundδὲ1Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
7125:12sri8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ1Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7135:12ux3nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletσημεῖα καὶ τέρατα1The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7145:12aud2rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἦσαν & πάντες1The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7155:12a359ὁμοθυμαδὸν1The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
7165:12k99krc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος1This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7175:13a360rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς1The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7185:13a361rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς1If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7195:14a362rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyπροσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ1Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7205:14m9wxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπροσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7215:14oxnirc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politenessτῷ Κυρίῳ1Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
7225:15a364rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultὥστε1Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7235:15l9bsrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐκφέρειν1The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7245:15a365rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοὺς ἀσθενεῖς1Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7255:15a366rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletκλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων1The words **cots** and **mats** mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7265:15y2evrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν1The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7275:15a367ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν1Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
7285:16a368rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἀσθενεῖς1See how you translated the expression **the sick** in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7295:16fu1arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7305:16lyc7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7315:16a369rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleοἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες1It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7325:17x2edrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
7335:17f9yerc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,1The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
7345:17pc45rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,1If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7355:17a370rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀναστὰς1Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7365:17a371rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων1The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7375:17a372rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7385:17a373rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου1Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7395:18j58prc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους1The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7405:18a374rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους1The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7415:19wd37rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς1The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7425:20qm16rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ ἱερῷ1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7435:20z1x3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyπάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης1The angel is using the term **words** to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7445:20a375τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης1Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
7455:21a376rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀκούσαντες1Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7465:21df1urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰς τὸ ἱερὸν1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7475:21l7ufrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον1The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7485:21a377rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneousδὲ1Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
7495:21a378rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπαραγενόμενος1This does not mean that the high priest and his allies **arrived** in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7505:21a379rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ1The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7515:21a380rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ1Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7525:21li6arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον1Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7535:23a381rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας1If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7545:23a382rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7555:23a383rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀνοίξαντες1Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7565:23ld7drc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν1By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7575:24k5g6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοὺς λόγους τούτους1Luke is using the term **words** to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7585:24baw2rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsπερὶ αὐτῶν1The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7595:24p78mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο1The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7605:25a384rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες1This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7615:25a8dzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youἔθεσθε1Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7625:25c1amrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7635:26e24hrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsτότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν1The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7645:27iq7wrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς1The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7655:28a385παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν1For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
7665:28f7pzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε1In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7675:28g2hirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ1The high priest is using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7685:28a386rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε1The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7695:28j4krrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν1The high priest is speaking of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7705:28a387rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorβούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς1The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7715:28a388rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμᾶς1By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7725:28ym1krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸ αἷμα1The high priest is using the term **blood** to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7735:28a389rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου1The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7745:29a390rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν1Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
7755:29di9urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitΠέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν1Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7765:29a391rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἀνθρώποις1Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
7775:30a392rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν1Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7785:30kwscrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν1Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
7795:30r7avrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν1As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7805:30a393rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε1The word **you** is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7815:30a394rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε1It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7825:30pu5jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyκρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου1The word translated as **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7835:30a395rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου1In some languages the word **hung** would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7845:31a396rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοῦτον1Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7855:31a397rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ1Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
7865:31uh2drc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionτῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ1God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7875:31mr1drc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7885:31q1ilrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἸσραὴλ1Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
7895:32a398rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμεῖς1Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7905:32a399rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisκαὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ1Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7915:32yml6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ1Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7925:33abx6rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς1The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7935:34i2rrrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsτις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
7945:34a401rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΓαμαλιήλ1**Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7955:34a402rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundνομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ1Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
7965:34fpr4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7975:34a403rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleτίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ1The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
7985:34a404rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἀναστὰς1Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
7995:34xk6grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι1Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8005:34a405rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjβραχὺ1Luke is using the adjective **little** as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8015:35a406rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequentialτε1Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
8025:35a407rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται1This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8035:35ae1urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπροσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν1Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8045:36a408rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν1Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8055:36a409rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΘευδᾶς1**Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8065:36uaj6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀνέστη1In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8075:36b3nlrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomλέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν1In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8085:36a410rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8095:36ie3xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὃς ἀνῃρέθη1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8105:36juz1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8115:36a411rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveδιελύθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8125:36rzg5καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν1Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
8135:37f33yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjμετὰ τοῦτον1Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8145:37a412rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἸούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος1The word **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8155:37a413rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀνέστη1As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8165:37p56frc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς1Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8175:37kz4src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ1Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8185:37a414rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjκἀκεῖνος1Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8195:37a415rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ1If your language would not use the passive form **were persuaded**, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8205:37a416rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveδιεσκορπίσθησαν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8215:38i4bwκαὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν1Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
8225:38a417rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Gamaliel is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8235:38wz89ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς1When Gamaliel tells the council to **keep away from these men**, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
8245:38zh1dἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο1Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
8255:38a418rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsἀνθρώπων1Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
8265:38uql8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκαταλυθήσεται1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8275:39a419rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrastδὲ1Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
8285:39j819rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsεἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν1Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8295:39a420rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitμήποτε1It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8305:39a421rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκαὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8315:39a422rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveεὑρεθῆτε1The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8325:39cyp1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8335:40z31crc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ1Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8345:40p6lzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheπροσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν1The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
8355:40fca9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyλαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ1The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8365:41a423rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου1Luke is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8375:41cv8yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveκατηξιώθησαν1If your language would not use the passive form **had been considered**, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8385:41lk82rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος1Here, **the Name** means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8395:42jj94rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstoryτε1Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
8405:42kyp6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ ἱερῷ1Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8415:42x424rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotesοὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι1Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
8426:introz5r50# Acts 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nActs [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The distribution to the widows\n\nThe believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “His face was like the face of an angel”\n\nNo one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
8436:1f8brrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις1Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8446:1cg5trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις1Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8456:1e7vbrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν1**Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8466:1s4qyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπαρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8476:1rde8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8486:2kwvorc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultδὲ1Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8496:2n5r4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjοἱ δώδεκα1Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
8506:2is74rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesοἱ δώδεκα1Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8516:2jm17rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorκαταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8526:2w9rerc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8536:2fwk6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorδιακονεῖν τραπέζαις1To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8546:3lcyxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀδελφοί1See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8556:3p1yzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους1The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8566:3mgidrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας1The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8576:3pxe5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsπλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8586:3i27arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης1When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8596:4b3bjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοῦ λόγου1The apostles are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8606:5wh9trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους1Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8616:5jaycrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ2Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
8626:5ajq1rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΣτέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον1These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8636:5vsykrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8646:5yqsjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8656:5cg5src://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἈντιοχέα1The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8666:6lvajrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsπροσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας1This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
8676:6wu1yrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας1The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
8686:7x48wrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory0As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
8696:7wu4lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν1Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8706:7ueierc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8716:7jg8yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει1Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
8726:7qq3lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8736:8et2jrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsΣτέφανος δὲ1Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
8746:8pzr0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorΣτέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει1Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8756:8h8sgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysΣτέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει1Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8766:8xscqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsΣτέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8776:8m0zhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletτέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα1The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
8786:9d74mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀνέστησαν1Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8796:9nei0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων1If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8806:9k88nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων1The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8816:9e7b0rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΚυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας1The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8826:10v5iarc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomοὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι1In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8836:10fnb2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysτῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει1Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
8846:10psharc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8856:11ren5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας1The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8866:11s2clrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἀκηκόαμεν1The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
8876:11x747rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyλαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα1The men are using the term **words** to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8886:12tqk9rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsσυνεκίνησάν1In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8896:12l251rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorσυνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς1Luke says that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8906:13zv6src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesοὐ παύεται λαλῶν1If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
8916:13ju6wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyλαλῶν ῥήματα1The men are using the term **words** to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8926:13o3j2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου1The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8936:14uok4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν τόπον τοῦτον1By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8946:14vak4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς1The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8956:15k8rwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simileεἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου1Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
8967:introp9h40# Acts 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThis chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in [6:13–14](../06/13.md). Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin.\n- (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him\n- (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses\n- (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law\n- (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave\n- (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built\n- (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build\n- (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members\n- (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.\n\nA note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.\n\nIt appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Stephen said”\n\nStephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.\n\n### “Full of the Holy Spirit”\n\nThe Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.\n\n### Foreshadowing\n\nWhen an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in [7:58](../07/58.md), even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Implied information\n\nStephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Metonymy\n\nStephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Important Textual issues in this Chapter\n\n### “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)\n\nIn [7:46](../07/46.md), some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Background knowledge\n\nThe Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.\n\n### Reference of “our” and “you”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
8977:1hy9rrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ ἀρχιερεύς1# Connecting Statement:\n\nLuke assumes that his readers will know that **the high priest** was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8987:2abc7rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsὁ δὲ ἔφη1The pronoun **he** refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
8997:2zbq0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες1The phrase **Men, brothers and fathers** is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9007:2v5sirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες1Stephen is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9017:2kfeprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης1If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9027:2n09prc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης1Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in [6:11](../06/11.md) that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the **God of glory** acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9037:2pt4hrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμῶν1Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
9047:2w1yarc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ1Stephen is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9057:3uksjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω1If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
9067:3kgefrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsεἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν1The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9077:4pfg3rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν1The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of the word **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9087:4pfg4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youὑμεῖς1The word **you** is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
9097:5tnsmrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ1The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9107:5ax1jοὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ1Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
9117:5qff6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός1This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9127:5u6iwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorαὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν1The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9137:5j09vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsαὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν1If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9147:6orw2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotationsἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια1It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
9157:6tn6brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9167:6jymvrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν1Stephen is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9177:7k8pzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesκαὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ1If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
9187:7f7fwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸ ἔθνος1Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9197:7q7y6rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν1As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9207:8iwfxrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν1The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9217:8mwc9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς1Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9227:8g67frc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesτὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ1These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
9237:8ams1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisκαὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας1Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
9247:8gawwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word **patriarchs** to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9257:9n981rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinshipοἱ πατριάρχαι1Here the word **patriarchs** refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
9267:9tik7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον1Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9277:9w1isrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ1When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9287:10kxgkrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ1In these phrases the word **he** refers to God and the words **him** and **his** refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9297:10bfoorc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ1If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **favor** and **wisdom** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9307:10vpirrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐναντίον Φαραὼ1Here the phrase **before Pharaoh** may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9317:10s5vkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐναντίον Φαραὼ1The phrase **before Pharaoh** could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9327:10nycsrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsκατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ1In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9337:10yr7mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον1The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9347:10pb4prc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ1The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9357:11p42jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη1Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9367:11frd4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsκαὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9377:11p37vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν1Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9387:12pia8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον1Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9397:12cvhmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον1By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9407:12mbg8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν1Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9417:13a5f3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ1Stephen is using the adjective **second** as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds **time** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
9427:13ce2brc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinalἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ1If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
9437:13m37erc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9447:13jxk8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveφανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ1The phrase **became known** is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9457:14aam5rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goalἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ1Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
9467:14wl32rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε1Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9477:15zasprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον1Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9487:15w2smrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν1Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9497:15fe56rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorαὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν1Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9507:16slg3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveμετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9517:16la8arc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτιμῆς ἀργυρίου1Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9527:17tuq2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-eventsκαθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη1In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
9537:17kh8grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationκαθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ1Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
9547:17tlh9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ1Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9557:17s2oerc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη1Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
9567:18whe7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον1When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9577:18g2wqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον1The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9587:18e2y6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ1Stephen is not saying that this king **did not know Joseph** personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9597:19qwbirc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὗτος1**He** refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9607:19z312rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοὺς πατέρας1Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9617:19ug6crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτοὺς πατέρας1Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9627:19rh3krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9637:19n2vlrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesεἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι1Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9647:20nib6rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneousἐν ᾧ καιρῷ1Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
9657:20q66src://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς1Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
9667:20cz9wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9677:20cd5zrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ1This could mean: (1) that Moses was **beautiful** in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very **beautiful**. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9687:20pnb1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9697:21w3iurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ1Moses **was exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9707:21el3brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀνείλατο αὐτὸν1This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus [2:1–10](../exo/02/01.md).) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9717:22c9nwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9727:22att9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων1Stephen says **all** as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9737:22m3dmδυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ1Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
9747:23o4cgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος1This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9757:23b9gdrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος1Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9767:23ckxjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ1The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9777:23fj9src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ1Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9787:23x493rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ1Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9797:23i4korc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotationsτοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ1Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
9807:24l4zvrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the Egyptian** who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9817:24y3yhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9827:24r2e8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9837:25hrshrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοὺς ἀδελφοὺς1Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9847:25f6snrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsδίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9857:25nhb9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyδιὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ1Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9867:26t2vcrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitαὐτοῖς1It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9877:26qyc2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualαὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε1Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
9887:26mpc7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsσυνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
9897:26kyderc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
9907:26zzt4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἄνδρες1This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
9917:26z5g2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀδελφοί1Moses is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9927:26k1kurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?1Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9937:27xef7rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsαὐτὸν1The word **him** refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
9947:27iq30rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
9957:27q2r4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?1The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9967:27wtq4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν1In this context, the words **ruler** and **judge** mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
9977:27t1hwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusiveἡμῶν1The man is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
9987:28vow8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesμὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον1The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **do you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9997:28hk1grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionμὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?1The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10007:28qfxhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesμὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10017:28jxkaὃν τρόπον1Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
10027:29l149rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ1The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10037:29rbhmrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ1Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10047:29q8qvrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10057:30zx1crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα1This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10067:30qci0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα1Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10077:30veftrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος1The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10087:30f7yurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος1Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10097:31q6w6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10107:31uk7urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personificationἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου1Stephen is speaking of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
10117:32b26orc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10127:33bpmlrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10137:33x7cdrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionλῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν1In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
10147:33rxnjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitλῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου1The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10157:33xl9pτὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου1Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **sandals**. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
10167:33clk4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν1The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made **holy** by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10177:34l0aurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον.1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10187:34yz7brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἰδὼν, εἶδον1Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb **seen** is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10197:34x5bgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionτοῦ λαοῦ μου1God uses the possessive word **my** to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
10207:34j32crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorκατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς1God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10217:34atdorc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ3God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
10227:34sq8yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeνῦν δεῦρο1God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
10237:34x34crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarativeἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον1God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
10247:35-38x4p2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litanyτοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν1Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
10257:35nv5grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10267:35vuqyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν?1See how you translated this rhetorical question in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10277:35oic6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν1See how you translated the combination of **ruler** and **judge** in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10287:35vp7eλυτρωτὴν1In this context, the word translated **redeemer** refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
10297:35yjz9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyσὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου1Here, **hand** is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10307:35abc9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ1See how you translated the word **appeared** in [7:30](../07/30.md). Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10317:36gz9rrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletτέρατα καὶ σημεῖα1The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
10327:36n75xrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἘρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ1Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10337:37k710rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10347:37vykprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ1Stephen is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10357:37b4sgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπροφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ1Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10367:37j2rxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν1Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10377:38fd25rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος1**This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10387:38z1z7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureμετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα1It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
10397:38vdnzrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsτῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο1This second instance of **who** in the verse refers to Moses, not to the **fathers**. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10407:38y2zurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα1It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the **words** that he **received.** Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10417:38p3xkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyλόγια ζῶντα1Stephen is using the term **words** to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10427:38w2gsrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorλόγια ζῶντα1Stephen is using the term **living** to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10437:39ab0src://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν1The word **whom** refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10447:39mvz8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀπώσαντο1Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10457:39z3zerc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον1Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10467:40l8u7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotesεἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ.1If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10477:40kb3oεἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών1It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
10487:40a68qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ1It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
10497:41ux1jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐμοσχοποίησαν1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this **image of a calf** was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as **the idol** later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10507:41v6txrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις1Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10517:41hjp0rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐμοσχοποίησαν1The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10527:41hh77rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν1Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands** by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10537:42d3ddrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς1Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10547:42u7lxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ1Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10557:42ya6vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveγέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10567:42f314rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitβίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν1This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10577:42w38irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksμὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ1This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
10587:42o5lyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesμὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?1The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
10597:42gd1brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionμὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?1Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10607:42q9rrrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingularμὴ & προσηνέγκατέ1**You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
10617:42tck0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismσφάγια καὶ θυσίας1In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
10627:42j4q8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorοἶκος Ἰσραήλ1Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10637:43zek5καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος.1The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
10647:43h20hrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrastκαὶ1**And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../07/42.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me … , did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
10657:43q85nrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ironyἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς1The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
10667:43gxh2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingularἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς1As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
10677:43im7erc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ1The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10687:43cq47rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν1The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10697:43gm4grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε1The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10707:43zgq6rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultκαὶ3Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated **and** to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
10717:43rrn8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksμετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος1This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
10727:44fs4qConnecting Statement:0# Connecting Statement:\n\nStephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
10737:44hfmxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ1Stephen is not saying that the **tabernacle** was **with** the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built **according to the pattern** that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
10747:44m9gwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου1Stephen calls this tent the **tabernacle of the testimony** by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10757:44fk06rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureκαθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει1It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
10767:44masqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitδιετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10777:44avqhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10787:45uqcarc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronounsἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν1The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
10797:45qjovδιαδεξάμενοι1The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
10807:45n2scεἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ1When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
10817:45e3gurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitεἰσήγαγον1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10827:45eww5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν1Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10837:45spm5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν1Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10847:45zjljrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ1Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
10857:45wot8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ1Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10867:46k9vhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomεὑρεῖν1Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10877:46x4klrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronounsὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
10887:46ykiorc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10897:46yl80rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomεὑρεῖν1Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10907:46w3curc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorσκήνωμα1The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10917:46in7mrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariantsτῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ1Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
10927:46fsmprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorτῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ1Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10937:47k54crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorαὐτῷ οἶκον1Stephen is using the word **house** to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10947:47dlk8rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsαὐτῷ οἶκον1The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10957:48wucerc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesὁ Ὕψιστος1This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10967:48fwvurc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjχειροποιήτοις1Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10977:48c822rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheχειροποιήτοις1Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
10987:48ota0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorχειροποιήτοις1The word **houses** means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10997:48d4fhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκαθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11007:49oyaxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου1This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
11017:49k2vnrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου1Speaking through Isaiah, God describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11027:49i4u3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου1God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
11037:49wc9mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?1God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
11047:49rqr4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelismποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?1These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
11057:49mshprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorποῖον οἶκον1The word **house** means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11067:49vjaqrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsτόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11077:50hqjrrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarksοὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?1This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
11087:50rfk1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionοὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?1God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
11097:50jlg1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheοὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?1God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11107:50gzw0rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitταῦτα πάντα1The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11117:51umq6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamationsσκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν1Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
11127:51yxe3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjσκληροτράχηλοι καὶ1Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11137:51vn7hrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorσκληροτράχηλοι1Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11147:51zp55rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν1Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11157:51esfcrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν1Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11167:51jslbrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν1Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11177:51zgonrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε1The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11187:51w164rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingularὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς1The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
11197:51d2v8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsisὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς1Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
11207:52x7kfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestionτίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?1Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
11217:52eiw2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleτίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?1Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11227:52q8wbrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοῦ Δικαίου1Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11237:52agd9οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε1It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
11247:53axhlrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἵτινες ἐλάβετε1The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11257:53t92qrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdocheοἵτινες ἐλάβετε1The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
11267:53euw5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitεἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων1Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11277:54ef2grc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11287:54u4l7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomδιεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν1Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11297:54ae9src://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν1This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11307:55dluxrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorπλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου1Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11317:55ntp4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν1The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11327:55bl2jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitδόξαν Θεοῦ1The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11337:55zpryrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἸησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11347:55vamzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἸησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ1In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11357:55vyz3rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἸησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11367:56gzvvrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἰδοὺ1Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11377:56p0jgrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorθεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ1Stephen is speaking of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11387:56aqp8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitτὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου1The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11397:56imoarc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ1See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11407:56cr19rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ1See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11417:56rvwprc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ1See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11427:57p4cgrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionκράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν1The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11437:57wtwkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ1This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11447:57hm0qκράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ1If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
11457:57t287ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν1This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
11467:58ks1urc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως1Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11477:58teasrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ μάρτυρες1These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11487:58ryrhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου1The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11497:58wy7nrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownτὰ ἱμάτια1These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
11507:58sx2prc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomπαρὰ τοὺς πόδας1The expression **at the feet** means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11517:59fxhzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadysἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα1This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
11527:59k2elrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeδέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου1This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
11537:60u86qrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionθεὶς & τὰ γόνατα1Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
11547:60hi24rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ1This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11557:60dfjsrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeμὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν1This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
11567:60tvf8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesμὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν1If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
11577:60r9virc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemismἐκοιμήθη1Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
11588:introq9d90# Acts 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nThe story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32–33.\n\nThe first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Receiving the Holy Spirit\n\nIn this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15–19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.\n\n### Proclaimed\n\nThis chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
11598:1ez88rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundΣαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ1Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11608:1i1tcrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν1Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
11618:1vc8xrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ1Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11628:1xp25rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπάντες & διεσπάρησαν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11638:1u5pirc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάντες & διεσπάρησαν1The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11648:1k5a2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitπλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων1The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11658:1-2tp9erc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridgeσυνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ1It may be helpful to your readers to move the parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1–2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
11668:2sjc8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitσυνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον1The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11678:3yd2iκατὰ τοὺς οἴκους1Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
11688:3w6vkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitκατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας1Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11698:4n52lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjοἱ & διασπαρέντες1Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11708:4ymy5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveοἱ & διασπαρέντες1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11718:4su6irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11728:5gz5mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκατελθὼν1Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11738:5f45brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας1This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11748:5pk1lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν Χριστόν1Luke is using the name **Christ** by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11758:6cnt9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ ὄχλοι1Luke implicitly means **the crowds** in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11768:6jyvwὁμοθυμαδὸν1Alternate translation: “all together”
11778:6tt0irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου1Luke is using the participle **being spoken**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11788:6g0ftrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveτοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11798:6wm83τὰ σημεῖα1Here the word **signs** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
11808:7un6brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureπολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο1As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had **unclean spirits** being the subject of the sentence to the **unclean spirits** themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
11818:7peherc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjτῶν ἐχόντων1Luke is using the participle **having**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **those** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11828:7xb2nἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα1Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
11838:7nz7yrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomβοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ1This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
11848:7v8ujrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11858:7imbhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjπολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι1Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11868:7anq3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveπολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11878:8s8bmrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultδὲ1Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
11888:8z5z3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ1The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11898:8r0nzrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11908:9jm7nrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων1Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
11918:9bed1rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων1Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
11928:9cx7arc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΣίμων1**Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11938:10mvcmrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου1The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11948:10evt7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperboleπάντες1Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11958:10h51lrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου1Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11968:10ibl1rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merismἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου1Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
11978:10h5yarc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὗτός1The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
11988:10j3d8rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη1The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
11998:10yw5vrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἡ καλουμένη1If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12008:11pxj8rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundπροσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ1This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12018:12h1hgrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐπίστευσαν1The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12028:12zwojrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsεὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12038:12zjh5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12048:12jg1wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructureεὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ1Since Jesus inaugurated the **kingdom of God** when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
12058:12vsy8rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἐβαπτίζοντο1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12068:13k2thrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronounsὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν1Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
12078:13baygἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ1Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
12088:13v91trc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveβαπτισθεὶς1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12098:13rnr3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ironyθεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας1The word that ULT translates as **works** here is the same word that it translates as “power” in [8:10](../08/10.md). It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that **works** of power that are truly **great** are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
12108:13d4ybrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletτε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις1The terms **signs** and **works** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
12118:14s7lrrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventδὲ1Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12128:14lk9brc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotationsἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν1It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
12138:14uwxorc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamationsἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν1If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
12148:14ju21rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἡ Σαμάρεια1Luke is using the word **Samaria** by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12158:14e682rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12168:15af1nrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν1The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12178:15hd1wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualοἵτινες1Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12188:15hk1mrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomκαταβάντες1Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12198:15bun9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-goκαταβάντες1Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
12208:16d2z9rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorοὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός1Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12218:16l4ezrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-resultγὰρ1Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
12228:16qmjprc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegativesοὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός1In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
12238:16bpzzrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsοὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός1The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12248:16rn3crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyμόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ1Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12258:16m1nwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveμόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον1If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12268:17bsllrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον1The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12278:17bldfrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualἐπετίθεσαν1Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12288:17q7gdrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symactionἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς1Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
12298:18rh79rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveδίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12308:19fbw9δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον1Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
12318:20df1jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamationsτὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν1Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
12328:20y4nyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸ ἀργύριόν1Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12338:20gh12rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ1Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12348:21p2evrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doubletοὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ1The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
12358:21ufk3rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possessionσοι1The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
12368:21xbh2rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα1Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12378:21p9v4rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ1This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12388:22sa6src://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnounsἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης1If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12398:22ppk5rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου1Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12408:22pe2urc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-factδεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου1Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
12418:22lq4irc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassiveἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου1If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12428:23tf3src://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownεἰς & χολὴν πικρίας1The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12438:23kpu6rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyεἰς & χολὴν πικρίας1Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12448:23d3v7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorεἰς & χολὴν πικρίας1Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12458:23j696rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorσύνδεσμον ἀδικίας1Peter speaks of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12468:24n5cwrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdualὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε1Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
12478:24v2wyrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperativeδεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον1This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
12488:24hwc6rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronounsδεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον1Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
12498:24u1a4ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε1Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
12508:24sk5wrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitμηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε1Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12518:25nzvgrc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequentialοὖν1Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
12528:25p3rjrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitοἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου1The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12538:25uz15rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladjοἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες1Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
12548:25ww9krc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyτὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου1Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12558:25eu66rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyπολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν1The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12568:26mbj9rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-neweventδὲ1Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
12578:26w1nkrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀνάστηθι1Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12588:26le2crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomτὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν1The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12598:26a18yrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundαὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος1This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12608:27s0ynrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη1As in the previous verse, the word **arising** means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12618:27xy7xrc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participantsἰδοὺ1Luke is using the word **behold** to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
12628:27zkc5rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-backgroundἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ1This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
12638:27i5zhrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiomἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ1This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12648:27s1ufrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownεὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης1While the word **eunuch** describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12658:27t5t1rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-namesΚανδάκης1**Kandake** was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12668:27nm48rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphorὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς1Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was **over** the **treasure** of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12678:27v8q7rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ1The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12688:27uk32rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-goὃς ἐληλύθει1Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
12698:28d3kvrc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknownτοῦ ἅρματος1Here and in [8:29](../08/29.md) and [8:38](../08/38.md), the term **chariot** probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12708:28bx2jrc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymyἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν1Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12718:28n40crc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitἀνεγίνωσκεν1Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as [8:30](../08/30.md) explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
The file is too large to be shown. View Raw